Dodge 2011 Dodge Nitro Owner`s manual

Dodge 2011 Dodge Nitro Owner`s manual
2011 Nitro
2011
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
11KA74-126-AB
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Nitro
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
291686.ps 11Y532-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/14/2010 08:26:13
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 7
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it not.
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
INTRODUCTION
5
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
injury. Drive carefully.
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
Consult the following table for a description of the
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the this Owner’s Manual:
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
1
6
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is
visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also is stamped into the right front
door sill (under the molding) and appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
7
1
Vehicle Identification Number
8
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ Remote Open Window Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 24
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . 44
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 47
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 48
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 49
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . 51
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
䡵 Liftgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ Seat Belt Lock Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
11
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 57
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
▫ Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 64
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 86
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The keys for your vehicle are double-sided. You can bag with the key code number on it. If you received your
insert the keys into the locks with either side up.
keys without the bag, ask your authorized dealer to give
you the number. The key code can also be obtained by an
authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission
• Place the shift lever in PARK.
• Push the key and cylinder inward slightly and rotate
the key to the LOCK position.
• Remove the key.
Vehicle Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
13
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — Lock
2 — Acc
3 — On
4 — Start
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the engine.
key.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
position.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthor- seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
or unlocked.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded shut off after two seconds.
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
15
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key威 is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a 3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
that has never been programmed.
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
remove the second key.
authorized dealer.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Customer Key Programming
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
new Sentry Keys威 to the system by performing the
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
following procedure:
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s) Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
then turn off.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at least Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be prothree seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn grammed during this procedure.
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the
first key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
17
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When
authorized dealer for details.
the Vehicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
for door locks are disabled. The alarm provides both
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sysaudible and visual signals, the horn will sound repeattem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
edly for three minutes, while the headlights, park lamps
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reproand/or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 mingrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized
utes.
dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite differGeneral Information
ent. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
subject to the following conditions:
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Remove the keys from the ignition switch and exit
vehicle. Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing
power door LOCK switch or the LOCK button on
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Close all
doors.
To Disarm The System
the Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
the or insert a valid Sentry Key威 into the ignition lock
the cylinder and turn the key to the ON/RUN position.
the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
The Vehicle Security Light (located in the instrument Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If the
cluster) will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal previously described arming sequence has occurred, the
that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
16-second pre-arm period, opening any door or the you are inside or outside the vehicle. If you remain inside
liftgate will cancel the arming process. If the Vehicle the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
Security Alarm arms successfully, the Vehicle Security occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Manually
Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is unlocking the doors with the door lock plunger (located
set. Manually locking the doors with the door lock on the inside of the doors) or the driver’s door key lock
plunger (located on the inside of the doors) or the cylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
driver’s door key lock cylinder will not arm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
19
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console and door courILLUMINATED ENTRY
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
(extreme bottom position).
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and • For the remote starting feature (if equipped), refer to
liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
“Remote Starting System” for further information.
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using your Remote Keyless
• Your vehicle’s RKE transmitter may have three or four
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
buttons depending on the optional features purchased
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
with your vehicle.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock all doors and the liftgate. The parking lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
Three Button RKE transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors and the liftgate on the first
press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
21
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing
the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
On non-EVIC equipped vehicles, perform the following
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
steps:
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed ter to lock all doors and the liftgate. If the ignition is OFF
(i.e., functional) RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, when the doors are locked, the parking lights will flash
but not longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the once and the horn will sound a single chirp.
UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
• On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• On non-EVIC equipped vehicles, perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed (i.e., functional) RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not
longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
23
Flash Lights With Lock
The feature will cause the parking lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing
the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter.
• On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
• On non-EVIC equipped vehicles, perform the followRemote Open Window Feature — If Equipped
ing steps:
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
(i.e., functional) RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
but not longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
During the PANIC mode, the door locks and RKE
systems will function normally. PANIC mode will not
NOTE: The PANIC and SECURITY alarms are quite
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm system on vehicles so
different. Please take a moment to activate the PANIC
equipped.
and SECURITY modes to hear the differences in the horn.
If one should sound in the future, you will need to know Programming Additional Transmitters
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it. Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the PANIC alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the PANIC alarm is on, the
headlights and parking lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off, and the illuminated entry system will
turn on.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The PANIC alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second 1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater. remove the screw.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter
case apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
25
3. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
5. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
reinstall and tighten until snug.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Separating Case Halves
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- How To Use Remote Start
proved by the party responsible for compliance could All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal •
distance, check for these two conditions:
•
1. Weak battery in RKE transmitter. The expected life of
•
the battery is from one to two years.
•
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios. •
Shift lever in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry • Battery at an acceptable charge level
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still • RKE PANIC button not pressed
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
27
NOTE:
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
• Any engine warning lamps come on
• The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The transmission is moved out of PARK
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
• The brake pedal is pressed
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
Vehicle
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time, insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle. to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START position in order to drive the vehicle.
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
DOOR LOCKS
Start request.
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock knob to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the lock knob is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
29
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave unattended children in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death.
Manual Lock Knob
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is located on each of the front door
panels. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate.
If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key
is in the ignition and either of the front doors is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing
the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate.
A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
a door is open as a reminder to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically if all of the following
conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled
2. The transmission is in gear
3. All doors are closed
Power Door Lock Switch
1 - Unlock
2 - Lock
4. The throttle is pressed
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
31
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power 2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four times
ending up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
transmitter
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door LOCK switch
Automatic Door Locks Programming —
to lock the doors.
If Equipped
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
disabled as follows:
programming.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
its previous setting.
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un- NOTE:
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor- • If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will
mation.
need to repeat the procedure.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
• Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance
with local laws.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
switch.
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with The automatic unlock doors on exit feature can be
power door locks if:
enabled or disabled as follows:
1. The automatic unlock doors on exit feature is enabled. For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customerreturned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/
RUN and then back to LOCK four times, ending up in the
LOCK position.
3. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the
doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
33
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the automatic unlock doors on exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Child-Protection Door Lock
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial counter- NOTE:
clockwise to engage the Child-Protection lock and clock- • When the child lock system is engaged, the door can
be opened only by using the outside door handle even
wise to disengage the Child-Protection locks. When the
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked posisystem on a door is engaged, that door can only be
tion.
opened by using the outside door handle even if the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock WINDOWS
system, always test the door from the inside to make
Power Windows
certain it is in the desired position.
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys- door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
tem, always test the door from the inside to make passenger/rear passenger doors which operates the front
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
certain it is in the desired position.
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the ON/RUN or ACC position.
the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s and front passenger’s (if equipped for passenger side) power window switches have an “AutoDown” feature. Press the window switch past the first
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To open the window part way, press the window switch Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
to the first detent and release it when you want the If Equipped
On some models, the driver’s and front passenger’s (if
window to stop.
equipped for passenger side) power window switches
To stop the window from going all the way down during
have an “Auto Up” feature. Pull the window switch fully
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
upward to the second detent, release, and the window
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle will go up automatically.
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
door will cancel this feature.
up to the first detent and release when you want the
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
window to stop.
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Program- is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
mable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument door will cancel this feature.
Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
37
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
WARNING!
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information window before closing.
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your In- Reset
strument Panel” for further information.
At some point in time, it may be necessary to reactivate
the auto-up feature. To do so, perform the following
NOTE:
procedure:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
switch again to close the window.
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Button
The window lockout button on the driver’s door (below
the power window switches) allows you to disable the
window control on the other doors. To disable the
window controls on the other doors, press the window
LOCKOUT button. To enable the window controls, press
the window LOCKOUT button a second time.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle and
lift. Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the
plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the
liftgate.
Window Lockout Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
Liftgate Release
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a
window
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
energy during an impact event
collision.
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and rear
center) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
which lock the seat belt webbing into position by risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or
buckled up in a rear seat.
secure a large item in a seat — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
CHildren (LATCH).
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
41
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
WARNING!
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
(Continued)
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
43
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in an accident much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to
keep your passengers safe too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is located on the B-Pillar along
the outboard side and rear of the seat cushion. The rear
seat belt latch plates are located on the C-Pillar for the
outboard rear seating positions and next to your arm in
the center rear seating position. Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as
far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap.
Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
45
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Latch Plate To Buckle
(Continued)
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an
accident.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in an accident. The belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
47
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. shoulder belt.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
anchor point.
allow it to retract fully.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
worn snugly and positioned properly
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant ReThe folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
latch plate.
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
folded webbing.
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
Seat Belt Pretensioner
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
equipped with a pretensioning device that is designed to
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event
that fits you best.
of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
around the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
work for all size occupants, including those in child the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pressing the release button. To verify
restraints.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
49
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
position.
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
Third Row
N/A
Center
N/A
Cinching
Latch Plate
N/A
• N/A — Not Applicable
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position.
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Passenger
ALR
ALR
N/A
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
12 years old and under should always be properly
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
restrained in the rear seat.
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the the entire belt is extracted.
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
If Equipped
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
51
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front
Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
53
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
2
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
AHR In Reset Position
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock NOTE:
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
into the back decorative plastic half.
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy
management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
accident.
55
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. If the driver or front
seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
fastened.
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins within 60 seconds of the vehicle speed over 5 mph (8 km/h), by
WARNING!
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
continue for 96 seconds or until the respective seat belts
if the seat belt assembly “Automatic Locking Reare fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt
tractor (ALR)” feature or any other seat belt funcReminder Light remains illuminated until the respective
tion is not working properly when checked acseat belts are fastened. The driver should instruct all
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than
could increase the risk of injury in accidents.
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will chime once and illumi- 1. With the ignition in the OFF position, buckle the
nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light, then will proceed to driver’s seat belt.
the 96 second warning sequence.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the not start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be Light to turn off.
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
3. Unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
three times, ending with the seat belt buckled. This must
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
be completed within 60 seconds of turning the ignition
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
switch to the ON/RUN position.
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
dealer or by following these steps:
completed the programming.
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
60 seconds of the ignition switch being cycled to the
on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while reON/RUN position. Chrysler Group LLC does not recombuckling the seat belt.
mend deactivating BeltAlert威.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
57
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with
belt alert) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Seat Belt Lock Out
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that
long enough. When it is not required, remove the exwill not allow you to extract the center webbing unless
tender and store it.
the rear seat upper latch is engaged.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is an accident.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the steering wheel. The passenger’s
Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS/
AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on the severity and type of
collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
59
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
2
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) that run the entire length of
the headliner to protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtains (SABIC) Label Location
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag System Components
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
and Seat Track Position Sensors
system components:
• Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and
Front Passenger
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Occupant Classification System (OCS)
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
• Instrument Panel
• Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Weight Sensors
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
(SABIC)
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
sensors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
NOTE: The passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may not
deploy, even when the driver Advanced Front Air Bag
has, if the Occupant Classification System (refer to ⬙Occupant Classification System”) has determined the passenger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is
classified in the ⬙child⬙ size category. This could be a
child, teenager, or even an adult.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
(Continued)
61
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
These protective covers for the air bag cushions
are designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
(Continued)
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
NOTE:
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the side air bags during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll- brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants require side air bag occupant protection.
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC air bags deploy
downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
63
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bag.
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
frontal collisions, including some that may produce subThe ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collirequired for this vehicle.
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or the other hand, depending on the type and location of
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemen- severe initial deceleration.
tal Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), and front seat
The SABIC will not deploy in all side collisions. SABIC
belt pretensioners, as required, depending on the severity
deployment will depend on the severity and type of
and type of impact.
collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
65
Also, the ORC turns on the “Air Bag Warning
Light” for four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN.
After the self-check, the “Air Bag Warning
Light” will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes,
any part of the system, it turns on the “Air Bag Warning
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
Light” either momentarily or continuously. A single
from an inflating air bag.
chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic startup.
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruis in the START or ON/RUN positions. If the key is in the
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
LOCK position, in the ACC position, or not in the
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnosignition, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
not inflate.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
The OCM is located beneath the front passenger seat. The
OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the ORC. The ORC uses the
occupant category to determine whether the passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag should be turned off. It also
determines the rate of air bag inflation during a collision.
• Weight Sensors
Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system
applied weight and transfers that information to the
required for this vehicle. It is designed to turn off the
OCM.
passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an empty seat and
for occupants classified in a category other than an adult. • Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
The PAD Indicator Light (an amber light located in the
This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
center of the instrument panel) tells the driver and front
NOTE: Children 12 years or younger should always
passenger when the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child
turned off. The PAD Indicator light illuminates the words
restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
“PASS AIR BAG OFF” to show that the passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate during a collision
requiring air bag deployment. When the right front
passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are
placed on the seat, the passenger air bag will not inflate
even though the PAD indicator light is not illuminated.
67
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when
an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger seat. In this case, the passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag is ready to be inflated if a collision requires an air bag
deployment.
For all other occupants, the PAD indicator light will be
illuminated indicating that the passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is turned off and will not inflate.
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system, children 12 years or
younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in
an appropriate child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints”).
Indicator Light Location
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air
bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child in a
rear-facing infant seat.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Indicator
Air Bag
Front Passenger
Light
Status
Adult
OFF
ON
Child
ON
OFF
Grocery Bags, Heavy
Briefcases and Other
ON
OFF
Relatively Light Objects
Empty or Very Light
OFF*
OFF
Objects
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improperly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seatback
does not touch anything placed on the second row of
seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If there is a fault present in the air bag system, the Air Bag
Warning Light (a red light located in the center of the
instrument cluster directly in front of the driver) will be
turned on. This indicates that you should have an authorized dealer service the system immediately. The Air Bag
Warning Light is turned on whenever there is a fault that
can affect the operation of the air bag system. If there is a
fault present in the PAD Indicator Light, the Air Bag
Warning Light will be illuminated to show that the
passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be turned off
until the fault is cleared. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately. If an object is lodged under the seat
and interferes with operation of the weight sensors, a
fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator
Light and the Air Bag Warning Light. Once the lodged
object is removed, the fault will be automatically cleared
after a short period of time.
69
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible based on collision severity and type. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the and damage by themselves are not good indicators of
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im- the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
proved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it takes to
blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
protection.
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
(SABIC)
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
The Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
curtain air bag is only about 31⁄2 inches (9 cm) thick when
(SABIC) may deploy during rollovers and collisions
it is inflated.
where the impact is confined to a particular area of the
side of the vehicle, depending on the severity and type of The system includes side impact sensors that are calicollision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
only on the impact side of the vehicle. Because air bag require air bag occupant protection.
sensors estimate deceleration over time, vehicle speed
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The area
where the SABIC is located should remain free from
any obstructions.
71
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical comcover.
ponents that affect the front passenger air bag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo- • Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by Chrysler Group LLC/Mopar威.
nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
late the proper air bag deployment. Do not make any
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fasmodifications to the front passenger seat components,
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
assembly, or to the seat cover.
those which are approved by Chrysler Group
LLC/Mopar威.
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related components or seat cover may inadvertently change the air
bag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This could
result in death or serious injury to the front seat
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
If A Deployment Occurs
Enhanced Accident Response System
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
after deployment.
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
73
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
WARNING!
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
Deployed air bags cannot protect you in another
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
collision. Have the air bags, and seat belt retractor
immediately.
assembly replaced by an authorized dealer immedi• As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke-like ately.
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
75
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
2
76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
were buckled/fastened;
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipaccelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
time including babies and children. Every state in the
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perlaw, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
crash investigation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
77
There are different sizes and types of restraints for Infants And Child Restraints
children from newborn size to the child almost large
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
of child restraints can be used: rearward-facing infant
child.
carriers and “convertible” child seats.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who weigh more than
20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types
of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system (Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH).
2
78
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
air bag unless the air bag is turned off. An air bag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable safety
standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Except for the second row center seating position, all
passenger seat belts are equipped with “automatic
locking retractors.” The second row center position
has a cinching latch plate. Both types of seat belts are
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
79
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child • In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
tighten the belt (the cinching latch plate will keep the
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
belt tight). However, any seat belt system may loosen
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
the buckle with the release button facing out.
tight if necessary. For the second row seat belts with
• If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and
the automatic locking retractors, pull the belt from the
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
retractor until there is enough to allow it to pass
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
through the child restraint and slide the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is fully
again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
extracted from the retractor. Allow the belt to return to
secure, try a different seating position.
the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint. For addi- • Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
tional information, refer to ⬙Automatic Locking
Mode⬙.
2
80
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system (refer to Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren (LATCH).
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canabelt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltdian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s webpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
lap/shoulder belt.
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are older • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
81
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
slouching can move the belt out of position.
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child retheir back.
straint in any vehicle.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child re- All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages
straint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
system provides for the installation of the child restraint child seats having flexible webbing mounted attachwithout using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the ments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be
child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether installed in the outboard seating positions only. The
center seating position will accommodate LATCHstraps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.
compatible lower anchorages with flexible webbing
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now availmounted attachments only. Regardless of the specific
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
2
82
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
type of lower attachment, never install LATCH- The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at
compatible child seats so that two seats share a common the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
lower anchorage.
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
seat cushion surfaces.
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCHcompatible, you can only install the child restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to “Installing The
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
Latch Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
83
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardrear seating position located on the back of the seat.
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover
material. Then, locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint
and attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful
to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
Tether Strap Mounting
between the anchor and the child restraint. For the
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with outboard seating positions, route the tether underneath
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or the head restraint and attach the hook to the tether
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a anchor located on the back of the seat. Finally, tighten all
three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
2
84
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps belt. However, any seat belt system may loosen with
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if
tions.
necessary.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If
the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the
Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to
allow it to pass through the child restraint and slide the
latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is
completely extracted from the retractor. Allow the belt to
return to the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child restraint. Refer to
“Automatic Locking Mode”.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
2
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the
hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
For the outboard seating positions, route the tether under
the head restraints, and attach the hook to the tether
anchor located on the back of the seat.
85
Tether Strap Mounting
86
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
an accident. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
87
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
88
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
89
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Seat Belts
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
inoperable.
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
2
90
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
91
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 98
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . 100
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature . . . . . . . . 100
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 151
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 152
▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . 136
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Front Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Front Seat — Manual Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
95
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Service Parksense威 Rear Park Assist . . . . . . . 168
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 169
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 160
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 173
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink威 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 163
▫ System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Enabling And Disabling Parksense威 . . . . . . . 166
▫ Parksense威 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 176
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Glove Box Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Front Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Cargo Load Floor — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
䡵 Electrical Power Outlet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
䡵 Roof Trim Applique — Non Functional . . . . . . 190
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
97
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
99
Outside Mirrors
Power Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight trim panel.
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
3
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Power Mirror Switch
Press the switch to the L (left) or R (right) to select a
mirror. Using one of the four arrows, move the mirror to
the desired position.
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the
sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
101
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect™ Phone
works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
websites:
Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone allows up to
seven mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
• or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect™ features
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
button and Voice
(Uconnect™ Phone
button) that will enable you
Command
to access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or andetails.
other prompt.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
103
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer- • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instrucphone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
tions for pairing.
given a unique phone name.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
pairing instructions:
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
• Press the
button to begin.
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
“Device Pairing”.
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
and follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal IdentiUconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
after the initial pairing process.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dial By Saying A Number
• Press the
button to begin.
105
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
want to call.
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
of certain radios.
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
button to begin.
• Press the
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
“Call”.
• Press the
button to begin.
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
“Phonebook New Entry”.
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomonly in that language. In addition, if equipped and
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatiinstead of “Bob”.
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
Transfer From Mobile Phone
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phoneIf equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
book entry, if desired.
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook entry that you are adding.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonewebsite for supported phones.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the • To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
main menu.
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
107
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transstart the vehicle.
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE:
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- • Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
when the vehicle is not in motion.
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availdeleted or edited.
able for use.
• Press the
button to begin.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone- • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
book.
entry that you wish to edit.
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, •
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
•
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
•
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
Press the
button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete”.
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
button while the
from the list, press the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete”.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit • After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
Entry” feature.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
wish to delete.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
language is deleted.
button to begin.
• Press the
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
deleted or edited.
“Phonebook List Names”.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
button to begin.
• Press the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
say “Call”.
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
deleted.
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language • The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • The selected number will be dialed.
deleted or edited.
3
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call —
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
No Call Currently In Progress
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
button until you hear a
call, press and hold the
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
111
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the
button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button
while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,
as described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
Toggling Between Calls
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), one conference call.
press the
button until you hear a single beep,
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
Redial
• Press the
button to begin.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone Features
113
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
• Press the
button to begin.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Press the
button to begin.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency numvoice commands will be in that language.
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
Mexico.
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phoneNOTE:
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
specific and is usable across all languages.
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may Towing Assistance
not be applicable with the available mobile service and If you need towing assistance:
area.
• Press the
button to begin.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button and
some systems. To do this, press the
“Towing Assistance”.
say “Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528for the mobile phone directly.
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
WARNING!
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emerthe Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
gency, your mobile phone must be:
Towing Assistance references.
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect™ System,
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
• and have network coverage.
button and
some systems. To do this, press the
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
115
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
Voice Mail Calling
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working press the
a
number,
or
sequence
of numbers, followed by “Send”,
with Automated Systems”.
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
Working With Automated Systems
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
This method is used in instances where one generally has number on a pager.
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
navigating through an automated telephone system.
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
service or automated customer service line. Some ser- system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
vices require immediate response selection. In some say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
tones over the phone.
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone • Press the
button to begin.
network configurations. This is normal.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
one of the following:
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
use of this feature.
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you Phone And Network Status Indicators
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to notification to inform you of your phone and network
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of status when you are attempting to make a phone call
the voice prompt.
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
117
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the • When prompted, say “List Phones”.
button
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
and say “Transfer Call”.
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
button and
phone being announced, press the
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two secelectronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
with one electronic device at a time.
paired phone.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威 Select Another Mobile Phone
connection between your mobile phone and the This feature allows you to select and start using another
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de- phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
• Press the
button to begin.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button to begin.
• Press the
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • You can also press the
button at any time while
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
119
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
•
•
•
•
Voice Training
Press the
button to begin.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
training mode, follow one of the two following proceAt the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the dures:
prompts.
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
You can also press the
button at any time while radio mode):
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you • Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
wish to delete.
the session begins, or,
• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training,
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to Voice Command
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
best results, the Voice Training session should be comconsole (if equipped) and the mirror.
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
switched off.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
you.
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
• press the
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
121
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- • Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
cents, the system may not always work for some.
number combinations may not be supported.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Far End Audio Performance
not in motion is recommended.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
• low-to-medium blower setting,
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
• low road noise,
entries are not similar.
• smooth road surface,
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Read Messages:
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness If you receive a new text message while your phone is
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
If you wish to hear the new message:
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
• Press the
button.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
compromised with the convertible top down.
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
Recent Calls
• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Downyou.
load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, IncomAfter reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
ing and Missed Calls.
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Where are you?
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
4. I need more direction.
a new message:
5. L O L
• Press the
button.
6. Why
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
7. I love you
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say 8. Call me
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
9. Call me later
button while the 10. Thanks
To send a message, press the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
11. See You in 15 minutes
Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to. 12. I am on my way
List of Preset Messages:
13. I’ll be late
1. Yes
14. Are you there yet?
2. No
15. Where are we meeting?
123
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
• Press the
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
125
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
129
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
button, you
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
131
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton, listen dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
options, press the Voice Command
set to low.
for the beep, and say your command.
button while the
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
button and say “Help” or “Main
Command
Menu”.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, Commands
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
These commands are universal and can be used from any commands. Universal commands are available at all
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at Changing the Volume
a normal speaking volume.
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
this mode, you may say the following commands:
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Main Menu
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
menu.
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
133
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
mands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
Memo
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Switch to system setup”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Change to setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Main menu setup” or
— During the playback you may press the Voice
• “Switch to setup”
button to stop playing memos. You
Command
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Language English”
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Language French”
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
• “Language Spanish”
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Tutorial”
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Setup
button first and wait for the beep
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the Command
following:
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
• “Change to setup”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
135
Voice Training
SEATS
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™ vehicle.
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a six-way power
driver seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the front seat cushion. Use this switch to
move the seat up or down, forward or rearward or to tilt
the seat.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when you have reached the desired position.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.
Power Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
137
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel.
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of within two to five minutes.
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
WARNING!
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Manual Seat Adjustment
For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and
passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by
using a bar by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
139
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located and
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once
you have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Adjustment
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Seat — Manual Recline
To recline the seatback, lift the recline lever, located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the
lever when you reach the desired position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat
The front passenger seatback can be folded flat to allow
for extended cargo space. Pull up on the lever to fold
down the seatback.
Seatback Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
141
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compoFold Flat Passenger Seat
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
Head Restraints
identified by any markings, only through visual inspecHead restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Push Button
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
143
3
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Static Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The two outboard seats are equipped with adjustable
(Continued) head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward
on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press
the adjustment button, located on the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
145
• Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for information on tether
routing.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should be checked prior to operating the vehicle and
never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Adjustment Button
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
3
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold-Flat
Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still
maintain some rear seating room.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seat to its mid-track position.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to
fold down easily.
Rear Seat Release Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
147
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
To Lower Rear Seat
3
Rear Seat Release Strap
3. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
1. Locate the release strap on the lower outboard side of
4. Push down on the seatback to lock it in the folded
each rear seatback.
position.
2. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle).
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Raise Rear Seat
Recliner Adjustment
If locked in the folded position, pull the release strap The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
(toward the front of the vehicle).
comfort. Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear
seat to recline the seatback.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If interference
from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Rear Seatback Release Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
149
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, there are two latches that must be
released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push the safety latch lever to the right. It is located
between the grille and hood opening left of the center.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not slam the hood to close it.
• Lower the hood to approximately 6 in (15.2 cm)
above the closed position and drop the hood to
latch it.
• Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
NOTE: Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip
before closing hood to prevent damage to grille.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Latch
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming
and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Headlights and Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel lights. Turn to
the second detent for headlight operation.
3
Headlight Switch
Multifunction Lever
151
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights, Lights-On Reminder
rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the driver’s door
down.
is opened.
NOTE: If the driver’s door is left open, and the headlights or parking lights are left on, a chime will sound. High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
the headlights to high beams. Pull the lever toward you
The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime
to switch the headlights back to low beams.
Running Lights (DRL) and operate at lower intensity
whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is running, the Flash-to-Pass
headlight switch is off, the parking brake is released and You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steerthe shift lever is in any position except PARK.
ing wheel. This will turn on the high beam headlights
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will turn off
until the lever is released.
automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
on again when the turn signal is not operating.
The front fog light switch is in the multifunction
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking or low beam headlights and pull out the
end of the lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
153
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
3
Fog Light Operation
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the parking
lights or the headlights on low beam. Selecting high
beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signal Operation
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
• A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parkmore than 1 mile (2 km).
ing lights or headlights are on.
Lane Change Assist
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash the parking lights or headlights are on.
three times then automatically turn off.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
155
Interior Lights
The overhead light comes on when a door is opened. It
may also be turned on by rotating the control for the
dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward.
The overhead light will automatically turn off in approximately 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer
control is left in the dome light position and the key is not
in the ignition. Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the
overhead light operation.
Dimmer Control
Daytime Brightness Feature
Certain instrument panel components (odometer, radio
display) can be illuminated at full brightness during the
daytime. This can be helpful when driving with your
headlights on during the daytime, such as in a parade or
a funeral procession. To activate this feature, rotate the
left stalk one detent lower than the dome light.
3
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the
lever. For information on using the rear window wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle”.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Wiper/Washer Lever
Front Wiper Control
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
“park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON
position.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park”
position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
(Continued)
157
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
3
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval.
There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds
between cycles or from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h).
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired (for a maximum of 10 seconds).
Front Wiper Control
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
159
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the off position, the wipers will operate for two or three
wipe cycles and then turn off.
WARNING!
3
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
Push downward on the windshield wiper/washer control lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the
windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle.
The wipers will continue to operate until you release the
lever.
Mist Control
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the lever down to unlock the steering column. With
one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down, as desired. Pull the lever up to lock
the column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Tilt Steering Control Handle
The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
161
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The CRUISE
indicator will turn off. The system should be turned off
when not in use.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control Lever
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
3
162
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press down on the lever
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
will be established.
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
Tapping the RESUME ACCEL lever once will result in a
To Deactivate
1 mph (2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the Electronic
tap of the lever results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
Speed Control lever toward you, “CANCEL”, or normal
brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed set, push down and hold the SET DECEL lever. If the
memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning off the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the
ignition switch erases the set speed memory.
set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is
released. Release the lever when the desired speed is
To Resume Speed
reached, and the new set speed will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
163
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
moderate hills is normal.
ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist is a driver aid that senses for
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so obstacles behind the vehicle and provides both visible
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object.
Control.
System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep ParkSense威 operating properly.
3
164
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
key.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, a single chime
will sound once per ignition cycle and the instrument
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED.”
• ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
• If a ParkSense威 system malfunction occurs, a single
chime will sound once per ignition cycle. In addition,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
display “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” and the
LED in the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist switch will
illuminate. If this occurs after making sure the rear
bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris, see
your authorized dealer for service.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 to be able to stop in time when the
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense威.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
165
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash
soap, and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
System, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns the red
LEDs ON. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3
166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense姞
ParkSense姞 Operation
There are times when you may want to disable Park- ParkSense威 uses four sensors located in the rear bumper
Sense威, such as when towing a trailer.
fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in (200 cm) away from
the rear bumper fascia. The warning display located
Vehicles Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle
above the rear window provides both visible and audible
Information Center (EVIC)
warnings to indicate the range of the object.
You can turn ParkSense威 on or off through the EVIC.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Vehicles Equipped With ParkSense威 Rear Park
Assist Switch
You can turn ParkSense威 on or off by pressing
the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist switch located
on the lower switch bank below the climate
controls.
ParkSense威 LED Display
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red
LEDs, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of
the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind
the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view the LEDs
either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the
display above the rear window.
When the ignition is turned to the ON position, and the
system is enabled, the warning display will turn on all of
its LEDs for approximately one second. Then, the system
dimly illuminates the two inner most LEDs when it is
detecting no obstacles.
167
ParkSense威 is active when the ignition is in the ON
position, and the system is enabled, and the driver shifts
the transmission into the REVERSE position, and the
vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
3
168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY LED
Inner LED
1st LED
2nd LED
3rd LED
4th LED
5th LED
6th LED
7th LED
OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM:
REAR CORNERS
REAR CENTER
79 in (200 cm)
51 in (130 cm)
45 in (115 cm)
31.5 in (80 cm)
39 in (100 cm)
25.5 in (65 cm)
33.5 in (85 cm)
20 in (50 cm)
28 in (70 cm)
16 in (40 cm)
20 in (50 cm)
6 in (15 cm)
12 in (30 cm)
Service ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System is defective, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When
LED COLOR
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Red
Sounds for 1⁄2 second
None
None
None
None
None
Intermittent
Continuous
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition
ParkSense威 will not operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
169
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after making sure the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt, or other obstruction, see your
authorized dealer.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
HomeLink威 Buttons
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
NOTE:
HomeLink威
is disabled when the Vehicle Secuor sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
rity
Alarm
is
active.
channels.
3
170
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
171
Place the handheld transmitter 1–3 in (3-8 cm) away from • After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the gakeeping the indicator light in view.
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
System.”
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and handheld transmitter buttons.
and observe the indicator light.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
open and close while you train.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
NOTE:
then turns to a constant light, continue with program• Some gate operators and garage door openers may ming for a Rolling Code.
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
3
172
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door).
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
173
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
Security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
door or gate motor.
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door used at any time.
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
HomeLink威” Step 3 with the following:
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button, follow these steps:
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
3
174
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until Troubleshooting Tips
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program- •
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
•
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
•
in your vehicle.
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
erased.
General Information
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
175
2. This device must accept any interference that may be POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
received including interference that may cause undesired The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
operation.
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
3
The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
176
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave unattended children in a vehicle with
the key in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
177
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
and moves the sunroof in the opposite direction, press
the switch forward and hold. This allows the sunroof to
move towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
Pinch Protect Feature
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obmovement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
3
178
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunshade Operation
Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
open.
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
Wind Buffeting
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
door will cancel this feature.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- switch will remain active for up to approximately ten
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear position. Opening either front door will cancel this
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun- Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
window.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
179
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET
Your vehicle is equipped with a fused 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet. This power outlet is located on the instrument panel, below the climate controls. It has power
available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the
outlet for use to ensure proper operation. To preserve the
heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
3
Front Power Outlet
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob
and element must be used.
180
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty.
Power Outlet Fuse Location
M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
181
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
3
182
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rear passengers have cupholders at the rear of the
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers, center console.
located in the center console.
Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
183
STORAGE
Front Storage Compartment
The front storage compartment (located on the left side of
Glove Box Storage Compartment
the instrument panel) can hold cell phones, PDAs, and
The glove box storage compartment is located on the
other small items.
right side of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the
latch to open the storage compartment.
Front Storage Compartment
Glove Box Storage Compartment
3
184
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Storage Compartment
To open, press the latch and lift the cover.
Center Console
The center console has a removable storage tray which
can hold cell phones, PDAs, and other small items.
Removable Storage Tray
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
185
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving.
3
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light
The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate,
opening any door, or by rotating the dimmer control on
the multifunction lever to the extreme top position.
Cargo Tie-Downs
186
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident a hook
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
(Continued)
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
187
Cargo Load Floor — If Equipped
The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility.
One side features a plastic lined tray which can hold a
variety of items. The maximum load capacity of the load
floor is 400 lbs (181 kg).
3
The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches. In
order to use the cargo load floor, use the following
procedure:
1. Push both side mounted release handles (toward the
center of the vehicle) at the same time to release cover.
Floor Panel
2. Lift the cover.
188
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Flip the cover over, and lock panel back into position. REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
located on the control lever. The control lever is located
on the right side of the steering column.
Load Floor
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
189
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent posi- Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
tion for rear wiper operation.
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
only.
mirrors. An indicator in the button will illuminate when
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent to the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
activate the rear washer. The washer pump will defroster automatically turns off after approximately
continue to operate as long as the switch is held 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
(for a maximum of 10 seconds). Upon release, the wiper press the button a second time.
will cycle two times before returning to the set position.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned window defroster only when the engine is operating.
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
CAUTION!
position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will
resume function at whichever position the switch is set.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
NOTE: The rear wiper and the rear washer will not the heating elements:
operate If the liftgate flipper glass is open.
(Continued)
3
190
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF TRIM APPLIQUE — NON FUNCTIONAL
The Roof Trim Applique as provided on the vehicle is
non functional. Metal side rails and crossbars can be
purchased from MOPAR威 accessories to provide a functional roof rack system.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
NOTE: Metal rails/crossbars are offered by MOPAR威
accessories. See your authorized dealer.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
191
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity.
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Compass And Trip Computer — If Equipped . . 212
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Compass Display / ECO
(Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped . . . . . . . .
▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . 214
216
217
219
219
221
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . 224
4
194
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 227
▫ Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped . . . 246
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 236
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 238
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 246
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 247
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Operation Instructions —
CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . 250
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 255
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
195
䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 256
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 266
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 266
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
. . . . . . . 273
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . 274
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4
196
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Storage Tray
— Center Air Outlet
— Radio
6 — Glove Compartment
7 — Climate Control
8 — Heated Seat Switch *
9 — Rear Park Assist Switch *
10 — Passenger Airbag Disable Light
11 — Hazard Warning Flasher
12 — Electronic Stability Control / Traction Control Switch *
13 — Cigar Lighter / Power Outlet
14 — Storage Bin
* If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
197
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
1. Fuel Gauge
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
switch is in the ON/RUN position.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle
where the fuel cap is located.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
199
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
6. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H , this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
4. Low Fuel Light
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
pass H , the indicator will continuously flash and a
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
fuel is added.
to cool.
5. Seat Belt Reminder Light
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the veseconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
4
200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for 10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
7. Speedometer
when the ignition switch is turned to the
Shows the vehicles speed.
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In8. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head- dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
9. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxiproblem diagnosed and corrected.
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
until the vehicle is disarmed.
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
ON/RUN.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
201
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
for a defective outside light bulb.
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
13. Transmission Temperature Warning Light —
that caused the ESC activation.
If Equipped
11. TOW/HAUL Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates that there is excessive transThe TOW/HAUL button is located on the gear
mission fluid temperature that might occur
shift bezel. This light will illuminate when the
with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this
TOW/HAUL button has been selected.
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEU12. Turn Signal Indicators
TRAL until the light goes off.
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
202
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
14. Brake Warning Light
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
This light monitors various brake functions,
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
including brake fluid level and parking brake
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
application. If the brake light turns on it may
dropped below a specified level.
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condidisengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake the brake fluid level checked.
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
203
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
sary.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 15. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
problem is detected, the light will come on
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for aprunning, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
4
204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
16. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
18. SERV (Service) 4WD Indicator — If Equipped
Light — If Equipped
The “SERV 4WD Indicator Light” will come on
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conwhen the ignition key is turned to the ON/
trol (ESC) is off.
RUN position and will stay on for two seconds.
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
17. Charging System Light
properly and that service is required.
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
205
21. Oil Pressure Warning Light
19. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
will sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
is not functioning and that service is required. However, This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
the conventional brake system will continue to operate The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
22. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
20. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
further information.
lights are On.
4
206
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
23. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(RPM x 1000). When the engine RPM are kept within the
green area, you are driving the vehicle in a fuel efficient
manner. Before the pointer reaches the red area, ease up
on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
24. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
207
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
208
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
26. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for
additional information.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the odometer:
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator Off
ECO-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator On
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
LoWASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Cluster, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ECO / ECO-ON (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you are
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ON
depending on driving habits and vehicle usage. Press the
Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator)
button to change the display from odometer to either of
the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO” display.
gASCAP Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
“gASCAP” will be displayed in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
odometer reset button to turn the gASCAP message off. If
the problem continues, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
209
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
CHAngE OIL Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless
reset, this message will continue to display each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn
off the message temporarily, press and release the TRIP
4
210
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster. To reset the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
the oil change indicator system (after performing the does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following proce- ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
dure:
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
Do not start the engine.
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
times within 10 seconds.
not require towing.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
27. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
211
29. Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO
(Fuel Saver Indicator) Button
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
Changing the Display
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO”
display. Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip
odometer mode. On vehicles equipped with a Base
Cluster, press and release it once again to display the
outside temperature. On vehicles equipped with a Mid
Line Cluster, press and release it once again to display the
28. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
outside temperature and compass heading in the screen
This indicator lights when the electronic speed control
below the speedometer. Refer to “Compass/Trip Comsystem is turned on.
puter” for details.
Resetting the Trip Odometer
Display the trip mileage that you want to reset, “Trip A”
or “Trip B.” Then push and hold the button (approximately two seconds) until the display resets to 0. The
odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.
4
212
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
located on the lower left part of the cluster below the fuel
30. Compass/Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle
and engine temperature gauge, and the tachometer.
Information Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Compass/Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) messages.
For further information, refer to “Compass/Trip Computer” or “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)”.
31. 4WD Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates the vehicle is in four-wheel
drive and 4LOCK. 4WD allows all four wheels
to receive torque from the engine
simultaneously.
COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER —
IF EQUIPPED
The Compass/Trip Computer features a driverinteractive display (displays information on outside temperature, compass direction, and trip information). It is
Compass/Trip Computer Display
Control Buttons
Press and release the odometer/trip odometer reset button (right side of the instrument cluster) to access the
compass/trip computer displays.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
213
The compass/trip computer, when the appropriate conditions exist, will show the following messages in the
odometer display:
• Door Ajar (door)
• Lift Gate Ajar (gATE)
• Loose Fuel Cap (gASCAP)
These messages can be manually turned off by pressing
the right button (on the instrument cluster).
Trip Conditions
Display Button
Trip Odometer (ODO) / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator)
— If Equipped
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the right button (on the instrument cluster) to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B
or to ECO. Press and hold the right button while the
odometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset.
4
214
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip A
Compass/Temperature Display
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
Compass Variance
reset.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
reset.
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
differences and provide the most accurate compass headThe ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you are
ing.
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. NOTE:
The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ON • A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as
depending on driving habits and vehicle usage.
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
tracks, etc.
• Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top
of the right rear quarter window. This is where the
compass sensor is located.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
215
zone, press and release the CMTC reset button to increase
the variance one step. Repeat as necessary until the
desired variance is achieved.
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During programming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
zone 1.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal,
you may wish to calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the compass, make sure the proper zone is selected.
Compass Variance Map
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
PARK position.
To Set The Variance
Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector 2. Press and hold the CMTC reset button (for approxilever in the PARK position. Press and hold the CMTC mately 10 seconds) until the current variance zone numreset button (for approximately ten seconds) until the ber is displayed.
current variance zone number is displayed. To change the
4
216
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Release the CMTC reset button, then press and hold
again for approximately 10 seconds, until the direction is
displayed, with the CAL indicator on continuously in the
display.
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
in one or more complete 360–degree circles, under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large
metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the variety of useful information by pressing the switches
instrument cluster.
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
• System Status
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped)
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Uconnect™ gps system screens (if equipped)
• Audio Mode Display
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Uconnect™ gps (if equipped), System Status, and Personal Settings.
217
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection. Also, the FUNCTION SELECT button changes the current CD track being played
(if equipped) when the EVIC is in the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen.
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through
Navigation (if equipped), System Status Messages, and Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features).
Press and release the COMPASS/TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
• Turn signal on (with a continuous warning chime)
4
218
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Left front turn signal light out (with a single chime)
• Left rear turn signal light out (with a single chime)
• Right front turn signal light out (with a single chime)
• Right rear turn signal light out (with a single chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Left front low pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And
Operating”.
• Left rear low pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And
Operating”.
• Right front low pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And
• Left/right front door ajar (one or more doors open,
Operating”.
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph/1.6 km/h)
• Right rear low pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
• Left/right rear door ajar (one or more doors open,
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph/1.6 km/h)
Operating”.
• Personal Settings not available – vehicle not in PARK
• Door(s) ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in • Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
motion)
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And
Operating”.
• Liftgate ajar (with a single chime)
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting
And Operating”).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Oil change required (with a single chime).
• Park Assist Disabled
• Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)
• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message
will continue to display each time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset
219
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following trip functions displays in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty
4
220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Elapsed Time
• Display Units of Measure in
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the trip
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
computer functions.
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa- the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
tion:
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
• Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. to a text display of LOW FUEL. This display will conWhen the fuel economy is reset, the display will read tinue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a signifi“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the cant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW
history information will be erased, and the averaging will FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
• Elapsed Time
reset.
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is or START position.
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
221
• Display Units of Measure in:
Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) —
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC- If Equipped
The compass readings indicate the direction
TION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC”
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
appears.
compass button to display one of eight
To Reset The Display
compass readings and the outside temperaReset will only occur while a resettable function is being COMPASS
ture.
Button
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being dis- NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within be driven several minutes before the updated temperathree seconds of resetting the currently displayed func- ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
tion. (Reset ALL will display during this three-second displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
window).
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
The ECO message will display below the outside temperature in the EVIC display. This message will appear
whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
4
222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving Manual Compass Calibration
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
compass into the calibration mode manually as follows:
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached.
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass” is
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or displayed in the EVIC.
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
start the calibration. The CAL indicator will be displayed
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and in the EVIC.
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
etc.
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
223
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
4
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the top of the right rear quarter window. This is where
the compass sensor is located.
Compass Variance Map
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approximately two seconds.
224
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the SCROLL button until the “Compass Vari- Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
ance” message and the last variance zone number dis- choices:
plays in the EVIC.
Language
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button When in this display you may select one of five lanuntil the proper variance zone is selected according to the guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
map.
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.
select English, Espanol, or Francais. As you continue, the
Personal Settings
information will display in the selected language.
(Customer-Programmable Features)
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
features when the transmission is in PARK.
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set- To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
tings displays in the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
Remote Key Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
225
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or
OFF appears.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
4
226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone™ (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front
vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “Off,” “45 sec,” “5 min,” or “10 min” appears.
Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with turned ON or
turned OFF through the EVIC, to make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button. Refer
to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display; this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
227
Display Units of Measure in
The EVIC and navigation system (if equipped) can be
changed between English and Metric units of measure.
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC
appears.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
4
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
Media Center 230 (REQ)
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
volume and to the left decreases it.
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command in the
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
set at the same volume level as last played.
details.
SEEK Buttons
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
screen.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
229
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not knob to save the time change.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
screen.
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
TIME Button
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
step 2.
and frequency display.
INFO Button
Clock Setting Procedure
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
4
230
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
Program Type
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
231
16-Digit Character Display
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
4
232
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon • DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
up and down the menu (if equipped).
mode.
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
SETUP Button
will display the following:
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
available on the disc (if equipped).
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
233
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change • Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
equipped).
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
NOTE:
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
• The available selections for each of the above entries
changes.
varies depending upon the disc.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
• These selections can only be made while playing a
user to scroll through the following items and set
DVD.
defaults according to customer preference.
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
Menu Language — If Equipped
OFF (if equipped).
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
equipped).
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
• VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
number and then push to select.
4
234
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
Subtitles — If Equipped
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
Off or On.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
235
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
customer-preferred settings.
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
AM and FM Buttons
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
When you are receiving a station that you wish to memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. twice.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
button number will display.
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but- Buttons 1 - 6
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
stored into pushbutton memory.
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
4
236
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
237
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
4
238
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
• Maximum number of folders: 100
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
following restrictions.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeradio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
character extension)
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
When reading discs recorded using formats other than disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
WMA tracks on that disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
239
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
WMA
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA
44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
240
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
affected by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
241
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
No function.
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilelapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
display for five seconds.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
No function.
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
down.
No function.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
4
242
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
For the radio, Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
DTS™
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital TheOperating Instructions - Video Entertainment
ater Systems, Inc.
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to “Video Entertainment System (VES)™” in the Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastdetails.
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
Dolby威
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories. Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilDolby威 Laboratories.
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
243
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
Number (ESN/SID).
4
244
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Reception Quality
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
following reasons:
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
structure or under a physical obstacle.
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
SCAN Button
form of short audio mutes.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause intermittent reception.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can button a second time.
cause signal blockage.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
245
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
direction of the arrows.
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
SETUP Button
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. following items:
MUSIC TYPE Button
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
4
246
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) —
If Equipped
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
button number will display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
247
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
side of the radio faceplate.
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
Media Center 130 (RES)
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
4
248
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
TIME Button
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
AM or FM frequencies.
and radio frequency.
TUNE Control
Clock Setting Procedure
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
SCROLL control knob.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
249
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second AM/FM Button
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
mid-range tones.
Memory
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third When you are receiving a station that you wish to
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
treble tones.
this station and press and release that button. If a button
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
the front and rear speakers.
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
4
250
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
pressing the pushbutton twice.
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
button number will display.
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Buttons 1 - 6
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
stations).
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
DISC Button
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
MP3 Audio Play
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
251
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
252
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
253
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension)
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
4
254
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
4
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
255
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
256
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
position to operate the radio.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the another selection. Holding either button will bypass
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second stations without stopping until you release it.
time to turn off the radio.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Electronic Volume Control
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The FeaThe electronic volume control turns continuously (360 tures If Your Vehicle”.
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
If Equipped
volume and to the left decreases it.
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle”.
set at the same volume level as last played.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
257
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under- knob to save time change.
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
and radio frequency.
procedure, starting at Step 2.
Clock Setting Procedure
INFO Button
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
SCROLL control knob.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4
258
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
Program Type
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
259
16-Digit Character Display
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
4
260
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
station and press and release that button. If a button is
SETUP Button
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
the following items:
be stored into pushbutton memory.
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
to save time change.
pressing the pushbutton twice.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
261
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
button number will display.
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Buttons 1 - 6
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
stations).
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
DISC/AUX Button
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Operation Instructions —
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
NOTE:
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
position to operate the radio.
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
4
262
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
263
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanThe radio uses the following limits for file systems:
dom Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
4
264
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension)
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
265
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
4
266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilINFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time⬙ priority mode.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
267
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you ESN/SID Access
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posiservice that is included with the factory-installed satellite tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
4
268
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
form of short audio mutes.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
cause signal blockage.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
(Satellite) Mode
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
on or above the antenna.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
269
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
INFO Button
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informaor turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availseconds will allow the program format type to be seable). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
lected.
4
270
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
type.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
and press and release that button. If a button is not
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
following items:
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
Sirius subscription.
twice.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
271
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features If Your Vehicle”.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
Remote Sound System Controls
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to The right-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
access the switches.
pushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
4
272
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the right-hand control CD Player
Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
the CD. Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the
The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
previous track, if it is within one second after the current
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
track begins to play.
Radio Operation
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
listenable station. Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK
down for the next listenable station.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch changes
CDs on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This button
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
does not function for all other radios.
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbuttons.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
273
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
precautions:
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
too high.
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
4
274
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
Manual Temperature Control
cooler temperatures, while rotating
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
right into the red area indicates
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
warmer temperatures.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
275
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
4
276
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a • The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehuwindow demist outlets.
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
Mix
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in • For information on operating the Rear Defrost, refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Feacold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
tures Of Your Vehicle”.
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
Defrost
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
Air is directed through the windshield and side
be used when outside conditions such as
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxismoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are presmum blower and temperature settings for best windent. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
shield and side window defrosting.
control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the system will return to normal mode function and the LED
will turn off.
Floor
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
277
NOTE:
Air Conditioning Control
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
Press this button to engage the Air
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
temperatures, while rotating right into
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the red area indicates warmer temthe outside air position for maximum defogging.
peratures.
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
control is set to panel or panel / floor.
• MAX A/C
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbFor maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
ing the mode control selection.
buttons at the same time.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
• ECONOMY MODE
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
4
278
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
Automatic Temperature Control
2. Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by rotating
the Temperature Control knob. Once
the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system. Should
the desired comfort level require air
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automati- You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
279
The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72°F Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for
(22°C) for the average person; however, this may vary.
automatic blower operation, turn the
NOTE:
knob to the AUTO position. In manual
• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
mode there are six blower speeds that
without affecting automatic operation.
can be individual selected. In off posi• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
tion the blower will shut off.
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates Manual Operation
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the This system offers a full complement of manual override
air conditioning is not necessary.
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
4
280
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
281
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument • Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Bi-Level
• Defrost
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there mum blower and temperature settings for best windis a difference in temperature between the upper and shield and side window defrosting.
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
4
282
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this button a second time to turn OFF the air
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.
• Recirculation Control
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Control button will temporarily put the system
in recirculation mode (ten minutes). This can
be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the system will return to normal
AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or defrost/
floor mode in order to improve window clearing.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Panel/Floor and then
press the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the
possibility of window fogging.
283
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
Operating Tips
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
suggested control settings for various weather condi- fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
tions.
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
284
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
long periods as fogging may occur.
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pasSide Window Demisters
senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
intervals.
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
285
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . 295
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Four–Speed Automatic Transmission –
3.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or –29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 293
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Five–Speed Automatic Transmission –
4.0L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped . . 304
▫ Single-Speed Part-Time Transfer Case . . . . . . 304
5
288
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Shifting Procedure – Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
䡵 On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 323
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 324
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 325
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 313
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 332
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
STARTING AND OPERATING
289
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 333 䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ 3.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ 4.0L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 353
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 341
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 358
5
290
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ Towing This Vehicle
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
. . . 377
. . . 377
. . . 377
. . . 378
STARTING AND OPERATING
291
STARTING PROCEDURES
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
WARNING!
Starting” procedure.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving Tip Start Feature
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the keys in the continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
ignition. A child could operate power windows, when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
other controls, or move the vehicle.
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any procedure.
driving range.
Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C)
Normal Starting
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, the use
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm of an externally powered electric engine block heater
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
accelerator pedal.
5
292
STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pressed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held
to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme
Cold Weather” procedures.
STARTING AND OPERATING
With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
293
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is found under the hood
clipped to the heater line on the left side of the engine.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
5
294
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in REVERSE. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended in a vehicle is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. A child could operate power windows, other controls or move the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key
can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition
is in the LOCK position. Once the key is removed, the
shift lever is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or
START position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
295
Four–Speed Automatic Transmission –
3.7L Engine
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-10°F (-23°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
5
296
STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be Gear Ranges
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake NEUTRAL position into another gear range.
when moving the shift lever between these gears.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever in the PARK position.
WARNING!
Shift Lever
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in REVERSE. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
297
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a Disabled
Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
DRIVE
This range is used for most city and highway driving.
2 (Second)
This range is used for moderate grades and to assist
REVERSE
braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow. Begins at
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to second gear.
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Will not shift into third gear.
NEUTRAL
1 (First)
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro- This range is used for hard pulling at low speeds in mud,
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be sand, snow, or on steep grades. Begins and stays in low
started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the gear with no upshift. Provides engine compression braktransmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
ing at low speeds.
5
298
STARTING AND OPERATING
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled fourth gear (OVERDRIVE). The
transmission will automatically shift from third gear into
OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present:
• the shift lever is in DRIVE
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, the transmission will
shift into third gear.
NOTE: The TOW/HAUL mode locks out Overdrive.
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h)
• the TOW/HAUL button has not been activated
The transmission will downshift from OVERDRIVE to
DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL button. This will improve
Tow/Haul Button
STARTING AND OPERATING
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
the switch must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
299
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the engine.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation. If the problem persists,
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operTransmission Limp Home Mode
ate. Only second gear range will operate in the DRIVE
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condiposition. Have the transmission checked at your authotions. If a condition is detected that could result in
rized dealer as soon as possible.
transmission damage, the Transmission Limp Home
Mode will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission Torque Converter Clutch
will remain in second gear in any forward driving range. A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly differ1. Stop the vehicle.
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera3. Turn the engine off and turn the key to the LOCK tion, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
position.
5
300
STARTING AND OPERATING
Five–Speed Automatic Transmission – 4.0L Engine
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles/kilometers.
Gear Ranges
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold. If
there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the
key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission
gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the
engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever in the PARK position.
Shift Lever
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in REVERSE. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
301
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
DRIVE
This range is used for most city and highway driving.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
REVERSE
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use this you to move the shift lever left (-) or right (+) when the
range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. shift lever is in the DRIVE position, allowing the selection
of the desired top gear. For example, if the driver shifts
5
302
STARTING AND OPERATING
the transmission into third gear, the transmission will Overdrive Operation
never shift above third gear, but can shift down into The overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled fifth gear (OVERDRIVE). The transsecond gear or first gear, when needed.
mission will automatically shift from fourth gear to
WARNING!
OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present:
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid.
• the shift lever is in DRIVE
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s) Allowed
• the vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h)
1
1
2
1-2
3
1-3
4
1-4
D
1-5
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating temperature
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum • the transmission has reached normal operating
deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever to the
temperature
left “D (-)” and hold it there. The transmission will shift
to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures, the transmission may not shift into OVERdown.
DRIVE and will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. Normal operation
will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
STARTING AND OPERATING
303
risen to a suitable level. Refer to the “Note” under To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
“Torque Converter Clutch” later in this section.
1. Stop the vehicle.
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature. This feature improves the warm up time of 3. Turn the engine off and turn the key to the LOCK
position.
the engine and transmission.
During cold temperature operation, the transmission 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the enmay not downshift from second gear into first gear after gine.
the initial first to second gear upshift.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condireturn to normal operation. If the problem persists,
tions. If a condition is detected that could result in
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to opertransmission damage, the Transmission Limp Home
ate. Only second gear will operate in the DRIVE position.
Mode will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
as soon as possible.
brought to a stop.
5
304
STARTING AND OPERATING
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at light throttle. It engages at
higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during
normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed
drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration,
the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED
Single-Speed Part-Time Transfer Case
Operating Information/Precautions
The transfer case is operated by the transfer case switch
(located on the center console).
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds of starting the engine.
Transfer Case Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically shifted transfer case provides two
mode positions:
• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
• Four-wheel drive high range (4WD LOCK)
The electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions (dry hard surfaced roads).
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the transfer case switch to the desired position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shifting
instructions. The 4WD LOCK position is designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only.
305
CAUTION!
• Driving in the 4WD LOCK position on dry hard
surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components.
• Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. Shifting while only
the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause
damage to the transfer case.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case. Tire rotation schedule should be followed
to balance tire wear.
Since four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
5
306
STARTING AND OPERATING
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition key
must be in the ON position with the engine either
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
key is in the ACC position.
will not shift. The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the
display under the tachometer) will flash until all the NOTE:
requirements for the selected position have been met. To • The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear
retry a shift, return the control knob back to the original
wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
“4WD Indicator Light” (located in the display under
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
the tachometer) will flash. At this time, reduce speed
2WD⇔ 4WD LOCK
and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
Rotate the transfer case switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with • Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure, or
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
excessive loading.
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
Shifting Procedure – Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case
STARTING AND OPERATING
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
307
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better parking maneuvers.
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
NOTE:
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactothere is a problem with the power steering system.
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
POWER STEERING
does not in any way damage the steering system.
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
5
308
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
STARTING AND OPERATING
309
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
Parking Brake
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
When
the
parking
brake
is applied with the ignition
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
switch
ON,
the
“Brake
Warning
Light” in the instrument
completely.
cluster will illuminate.
5
310
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
311
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph
(20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse and snow. This is normal.
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
5
312
STARTING AND OPERATING
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
WARNING!
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
CAUTION!
The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of
electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones.
(Continued) NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
This is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping distances, or brake damage.
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever possible.
313
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking
ability, and control.
• After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very
slow speeds.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes an Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five systems
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can various driving conditions and are commonly referred to
as ESC.
• Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,
which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in
loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while
driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuvering, parking, or stopping.
5
314
STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
STARTING AND OPERATING
315
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the deactivated.
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
WARNING!
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
Brake Assist System (BAS)
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, inThe BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydrosystem detects an emergency braking situation by sens- planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
5
316
STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
WARNING!
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condispeed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMintervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu- equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckvers. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It user’s safety or the safety of others.
can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, striking objects Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
and/or other vehicles.
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
STARTING AND OPERATING
317
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En- Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
maintain the desired path.
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
WARNING!
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot preundersteer condition.
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent colappropriate for the steering wheel position.
lisions, including those resulting from excessive
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lodangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
safety or the safety of others.
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
5
318
STARTING AND OPERATING
other stability features of ESC function normally. This
mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep
snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin
than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the
ESC On
“ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2WD, 4WD
mode of operation.
Part Time, 4WD Full Time, and on 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
mode. This mode should be used for most all driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
situations. ESC should only be turned off for specific gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situareasons as noted below.
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
Partial Off
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by briefly pressing
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while the vehicle
Off” switch (located in the center stack lower switch
is in motion.
bank). When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of
ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described in the
TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes in
2WD, 4WD Part Time, 4WD Full Time, and on 2WD
vehicles.
STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
319
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
5
320
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
STARTING AND OPERATING
321
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designastandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
322
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
323
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
324
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
325
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
5
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
326
STARTING AND OPERATING
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
STARTING AND OPERATING
327
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calcusengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
[295 kg]).
(392 kg).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
5
328
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
329
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire over-heating and failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
330
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear Information” section of this manual.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
consumption.
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
331
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
5
332
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
combine them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING!
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxiSpare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
Wheel – If Equipped
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
75 mph (120 km/h).
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
STARTING AND OPERATING
333
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
pattern.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipthe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempodriver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
80D18 103M.
with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equiptire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
5
334
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
335
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
5
336
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING
337
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for It is recommended you contact your original equipment
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
5
338
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class S” chains or other traction aids that meet SAE
Type “S” specifications.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as
recommended by the chain manufacturer.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
339
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of limited chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
(Continued)
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
if different than the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires.
NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted with
P235/65R17 and P225/75R16 tires.
5
340
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with
tires other than P235/65R17 and P225/75R16 tires.
There may not be adequate clearance for the chains
and you are risking structural or body damage to
your vehicle.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
STARTING AND OPERATING
341
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
Tire Rotation
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recomand natural pressure loss through the tire.
mended cold placard pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
5
342
STARTING AND OPERATING
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped
with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
343
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.”
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
NOTE:
the tire.
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire Base System
failure or condition.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
while adjusting your tire pressure.
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes readings to the receiver module.
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
stopping ability.
5
344
STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The
matching full-size spare can be used in place of any of the
four road tires. The TPMS will only monitor the pressure
in the full-size spare when it is used in place of a road
tire. Otherwise, a spare with a pressure below the lowpressure limit will not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault
will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
345
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full-size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to turn on upon the next ignition key cycle.
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
sensors.
(24 km/h) will turn off the “TPMS Telltale Light,” as long
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
that affects radio wave signals.
limit in any of the four active road tires.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5
346
STARTING AND OPERATING
Telltale Light” will turn off, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
TPMS to receive this information.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
Premium System – If Equipped
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light”
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash readings to the receiver module.
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off and to maintain the proper pressure.
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
• Receiver Module
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPMS • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare
STARTING AND OPERATING
347
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
wheel-wells)
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
Center (EVIC)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
the low tire pressure values flashing.
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The full
size spare can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure
limit will not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” to illuminate or the chime to sound. However, it
will cause a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message to
display in the EVIC.
5
348
STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing in pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold received.
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault
will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
349
Vehicles With Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In addition, the
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
EVIC will display a Low Pressure message and a graphic
sensors.
showing the low tire pressure value flashing.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
that affects radio wave signals.
15 mph (24 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
housings.
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
4. The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire
pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure
5
350
STARTING AND OPERATING
value. The EVIC will also display a “SPARE LOW addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSPRESSURE” message to remind you to service the flat TEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
tire.
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road pressure value.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
Light” will remain on and a chime will sound. In
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in the
flashing pressure value.
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
Vehicles With Compact Spare
STARTING AND OPERATING
351
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above FUEL REQUIREMENTS
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
3.7L Engine
information.
All engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
fuel economy and performance when usRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
ing high quality unleaded “regular” gasofollowing conditions:
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
• This device must accept any interference received, these engines.
including interference that may cause undesired
4.0L Engine
operation.
The 4.0L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfacThe tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
tory fuel economy and performance when
following licenses:
using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manuUnited States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
5
352
STARTING AND OPERATING
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline Reformulated Gasoline
is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline.
over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are speyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imhigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is prove air quality.
required.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoPoor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will prostarting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid- fuel system components.
ering service for the vehicle.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxyendorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World- genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties may be used in your vehicle.
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
353
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Problems that result from using gasoline containing E-85 perform the following:
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
• change the engine oil and oil filter
not be covered under warranty.
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
engine controller memory
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
5
354
STARTING AND OPERATING
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
355
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
356
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed
for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING
357
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
5
358
STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will VEHICLE LOADING
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
Certification Label
the vehicle is refueled.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understandincluded on this label and indicates the month, day, and
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is
bottom of the label is your VIN.
heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry, including
the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and
cargo.
359
Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components, sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability, does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Inflation Pressure
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
5
360
STARTING AND OPERATING
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and the brakes operate.
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
CAUTION!
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
361
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in Starting and Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- ready for operation⬙ condition.
hicles used for trailer towing.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or
more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
5
362
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
Tongue Weight
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
and trailer when weighed in combination.
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Frontal Area
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles maximum width of the front of a trailer.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in Starting and Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
STARTING AND OPERATING
363
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weight-Distributing Hitch
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverand trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
5
364
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, and braking performance and could result in a collision.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational
vehicle
dealer
for
additional
information.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
STARTING AND OPERATING
365
5
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing
Hitch (Incorrect)
366
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle is capable of towing trailers up to 2,000 lbs
(907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the
standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over
2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional trailer tow prep
package. See your authorized dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
367
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Model
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
Max. Tongue Wt.
Transmission
(Gross Trailer Wt)
(See Note)
3.7L/Automatic
4x2
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3.7L/Automatic
4x4
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
4.0L/Automatic
4x2
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
4.0L/Automatic
4x4
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo
(ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the tire and loading information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
5
368
STARTING AND OPERATING
When Towing Trailers with Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) between 3,500 Lbs (1 588 kg) and 5,000 Lbs (2 268 kg)
The following chart provides maximum trailer weight ratings towable for the following engine/transmission
combinations, ONLY if using a weight distributing hitch.
Engine/Transmission
Model
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
500 lbs (227 kg)
3.7L/Automatic w/Trailer
4x2
64 sq ft (5.94 sq m)
Tow Package
3.7L/Automatic w/Trailer
4x4
64 sq ft (5.94 sq m)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
Tow Package
4.0L/Automatic w/Trailer
4x2
64 sq ft (5.94 sq m)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
Tow Package
4.0L/Automatic w/Trailer
4x4
64 sq ft (5.94 sq m)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
Tow Package
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo
(ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the tire and loading information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
369
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side-toside which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
5
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
370
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or authorized dealer-installed
options must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and
Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
371
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer
wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).
(Continued)
5
372
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
brake controller is not required.
proper inspection procedure.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING
373
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The trailer tow package may include a four-pin and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
(Continued) NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
374
STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle,
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing up the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “TOW/
HAUL” button (if equipped) or a lower gear range
should be selected.
375
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you regularly tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
TOW/HAUL – If Equipped
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, press the “TOW/HAUL” button when driving in
hilly areas or shift the transmission to DRIVE position 2
on more severe grades. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in “Starting and Operating” for further
NOTE: Using the “TOW/HAUL” button (3.7L engine)
information.
or “4” range (4.0L engine) while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
5
376
STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
− City Driving
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transyou can get back to cruising speed.
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
− Highway Driving
maximize fuel efficiency.
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
STARTING AND OPERATING
377
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheel OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
Two-Wheel Drive Models
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing is allowed if the rear wheels are OFF
the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly
or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
3. Firmly set the parking brake. Place the transmission in
PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the unlocked OFF position.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
7. Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it
away from the battery post.
5
378
STARTING AND OPERATING
Flat towing (with all four wheels on the ground) is
allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is removed. Towing
with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft
is connected will result in severe transmission damage.
WARNING!
If the driveshaft is removed, the vehicle can roll even
if the transmission is in PARK, which could cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground (while the
driveshaft is connected) will cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a NEUTRAL position in the transfer case.
The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa- trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
tion. The parking brake must remain engaged unless the
CAUTION!
vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow
vehicle, or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled. See
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requireyour authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
and reinstallation procedures, including flange
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
orientation/alignment, use of thread-locking compound,
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
proper bolt torque specifications, etc.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Towing Without The Ignition Key FOB . . . . . 396
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
6
380
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning Flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
lower switch bank below the climate controls.
potential for overheating your engine by taking the
appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
381
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
(Continued)
6
382
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in the left rear trim panel behind the second row seat.
Jack Storage Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the
vehicle and is held in place by a cable winch mechanism.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use the
lug wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the
spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to
allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
383
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and they can
damage the winch.
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable and pull it through the center of the wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
6
384
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition to the LOCK position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To ensure the spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing up.
Jack Warning Label
385
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove spare tire.
2. Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket. Assemble the tools by connecting the driver to the extension, and then to the lug wrench.
3. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
6
386
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Locate the jack as shown. For the front tires, place it
(rearward) of the notch on the body weld seam behind
wheel to be changed.
Rear Jacking Location
Position the jack handle on the jack. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Jacking Location
For the rear tires, place it under the axle by the wheel to
be changed.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
387
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,
and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable and cause a collision. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct
wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install station.
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
Lightly tighten the nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
6
388
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper
locations.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Preparations For Jump-Start
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and positive battery post.
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
389
WARNING!
Positive Battery Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
6
390
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
391
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
6
392
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction ConIf your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it trol or Electronic Stability Control (ESC), turn the system
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your OFF before attempting to “rock” the vehicle.
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
CAUTION!
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving beto maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels, is most effective.
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
CAUTION!
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the enIt can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
transmission shifting occurring).
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
393
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully remove
the shift lever override access cover, located on the
PRNDL bezel.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position without
starting the engine.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6
394
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Using a screwdriver, reach into the opening and press 6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
and hold the shift override lever down.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
Shift Lever Override Access
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF
the Ground
Flat Tow
NONE
Wheel Lift or Dolly
Tow
Front
Flatbed
Rear
ALL
2WD Models
If transmission is operable:
• Trans in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph max (48 km/h)
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
395
4WD Models
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see “Shift Lever
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the
PARK position for towing.
6
396
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position,
not in the LOCK position.
Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
397
15 miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
ground (on a flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised using The manufacturer requires towing with all wheels OFF
a wheel lift or towing dolly), or remove the driveshaft. the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on
a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the
WARNING!
opposite end on a towing dolly.
If the driveshaft is removed, the vehicle can roll even
if the transmission is in PARK, which could cause
serious injury or death.
The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the
wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installation. The parking brake must remain engaged unless the
vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow
vehicle, or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled. See
your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal
and reinstallation procedures, including flange
orientation/alignment, use of thread-locking compound,
proper bolt torque specifications, etc.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when towing.
• Failure to follow these towing methods could
result in damage to the transmission and/or transfer case. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
䡵 Engine Compartment — 4.0L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 403
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
7
400
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
▫ Left Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
▫ Right Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
▫ Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Front Fog Lamp (Front Fascia Mounted) . . . . 440
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 432
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
▫ Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 444
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
401
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.7L
7
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Battery
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Coolant Pressure Cap
402
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.0L
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Battery
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Engine Oil Fill
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Coolant Pressure Cap
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
403
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
7
404
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacePress the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
MIL light off.
do the following:
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass crank or start the engine.
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
this test over.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not a normal bulb check.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
405
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personvehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
406
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
WARNING!
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
407
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.
7
408
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American
tion.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
API Certified engine oils.
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
409
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomEngine Oil Viscosity – 3.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature are followed.
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler Materials Added To Engine Oils
cap shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your Do not add supplemental materials, other than leak
vehicle.
detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- engineered product and it’s performance may be imfication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- paired by supplemental additives.
ber should not be used.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
Engine Oil Viscosity – 4.0L Engine
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred. SAE 5W-30 engine oil oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
is allowed during cold weather only to improve cold indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
weather starting.
7
410
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
NOTE: For best access to the oil filter, a drive on hoist
should be used instead of a chassis hoist (3.7L Only).
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of the manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
411
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
412
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
413
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental removed. Particular attention should also be given to
7
414
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hood latching components to ensure proper function. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
When performing other underhood services, the hood the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
cleaned and lubricated.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威 marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent, directly into the present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
lock cylinder.
function.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the Adding Washer Fluid
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a The fluid reservoir in the engine compartment should be
mild non-abrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
tions of salt or road film.
reservoir with windshield washer solvent/antifreeze (not
radiator antifreeze). Operate the system for a few seconds
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
to flush out the residual water.
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be
exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
415
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
7
416
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
417
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the Engine Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
vehicle.
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antiidle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser (if
Cooling System
equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
WARNING!
garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure entire system for leaks.
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
7
418
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty and contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Engine Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
the specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)
may result in decreased corrosion protection and
engine damage. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
419
Adding Coolant
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
anticipated.
to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionreplacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainteized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
nance period, it is important that you use the same
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
vehicle.
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOrganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威 the vehicle is operated.
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
equivalent.
will require more frequent coolant changes.
7
420
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that the engine
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
coolant reserve tank.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
WARNING!
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by anicooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To any ground spills immediately.
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.
421
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing the
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attensafely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
dant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature
is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked • Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
once a month.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
freezing.
7
422
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the recovery bottle does not
drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result
in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
WARNING!
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install only
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services or immediately if
the BRAKE warning light is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
423
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
7
424
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended
(Continued) fluid.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
425
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives to the transmission. The only
exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in
detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers
should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
Your vehicle is equipped with a capped transmission oil
fill tube. It is sealed and should not be tampered with.
Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that
the fluid level is set properly.
7
426
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Transfer Case
Adding Fluid
Fluid should be added only to fill hole until fluid begins
to run out of the hole.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
hole (1) when the vehicle is in a level position.
Draining Fluid
First remove the fill plug (1), then the drain plug (2).
Recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill
plugs is 15–25 ft lbs (20–34 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not over-tighten the plugs. You could damage
them and cause a leak.
1 — Fill Plug
2 — Drain Plug
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
427
Frequency Of Fluid Change
• Rear axle lubricant should be 0.5 in (11 mm) below the
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
bottom edge of the oil fill hole when the vehicle is in a
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
level position.
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
Adding Fluid
fluid becomes contaminated with water. Change the fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
immediately if contaminated with water.
specified above.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
Selection Of Lubricant
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
Your Vehicle” for further information.
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informaProtection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
tion.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geoFluid Level Check
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
• Front axle lubricant should be at the bottom edge of
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
the oil fill hole when the vehicle is in a level position.
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
7
428
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
Washing
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under- • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivabody protection.
lent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
completely with clear water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumuresistance built into your vehicle.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
What Causes Corrosion?
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Cleaner Wax or equivalent, to remove road film, stains,
The most common causes are:
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
scratch the paint.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
429
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
a month.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and liftgate are kept clear • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized
and open.
dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Special Care
7
430
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
remove soap residue.
heavy soil, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent, or
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polremove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
ishes. Only MOPAR威 cleaners or equivalent are recomsoap residue.
mended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car
washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
may damage the wheels’ protective finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- upholstery and carpeting.
ner:
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivawith a clean, dry towel.
lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
431
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
clean vinyl upholstery.
directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
7
432
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean
or equivalent, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water.
Do not remove the seat belts from the vehicle to wash
them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
the buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label that
identifies each component is printed on the inside of the
cover.
Totally Integrated Power Module
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J1
—
J2
30 Amp
Pink
J3
—
MiniFuse
Description
—
Transfer Case, Pwr
Liftgate Module
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J4
25 Amp
Natural
J5
25 Amp
Natural
J6
40 Amp
Green
J7
30 Amp
Pink
J8
40 Amp
Green
—
—
30 Amp
Pink
J9
J10
J11
MiniFuse
Description
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
Antilock Brakes
Pump, Stability
Control System
Antilock Brakes
Valve, Stability
Control System
Power Seat – If
Equipped
—
—
Anti–Theft Module
Lock-Unlock
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J12
—
J13
60 Amp
Yellow
J14
40 Amp
Green
J15
40 Amp
Green
J17
40 Amp
Green
J18
20 Amp
Blue
J19
60 Amp
Yellow
J20
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
433
Description
—
Ignition Off Draw –
Main
Rear Defroster
Front Blower
Starter Solenoid
Powertrain Control
Module
Radiator Fan
Front Wiper
7
434
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J21
20 Amp
Blue
J22
25 Amp
Natural
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
MiniFuse
Description
Front/Rear Washer
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
Sunroof Module – If
Equipped
Rear Center Brake
Lamp, Brake Switch
Trailer Lighting
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M7
M8
M9
M10
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
—
15 Amp
Blue
Frt/Rear Axle Lockers
Trailer Tow
115V AC Inverter – If
Equipped
Rain Sensor – If
Equipped
M11
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cigar Lighter
Front Heated Seat – If
Equipped
—
Ignition Off Draw –
Video System, Satellite Radio, DVD,
Hands-Free Module,
Antenna, Universal
Garage Door Opener,
Vanity Lamp
Ignition Off Draw –
Climate Control System, MW SENSR, Underhood Lamp
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M12
M13
M14
M15
MiniFuse
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Radio, Amplifier
Ignition Off Draw –
Instrument Cluster,
Wireless Control
Module, SIREN, Multifunction Control
Switch, Siren – If
Equipped
Trailer Tow (Export
Only) – If Equipped
Rearview Mirror, Instrument Cluster,
Transfer Case Switch,
Multifunction Control
Switch, Tire Pressure
Monitor, Glow Plug
Module – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M16
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
M17
15 Amp
Blue
M18
15 Amp
Blue
M19
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
M20
435
Description
Airbag Module/
Occupant Classification Module
Left Front Park &
Side Marker/Left
Tail/License/Park
Lamp
Right Front Park &
Side Marker/Right
Tail/Park/Run Lamp
Automatic Shutdown
#1 and #2
Instrument Cluster
Interior Light, Switch
Bank, Steering Column Module
7
436
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Automatic Shutdown
#3
Right Horn
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M27
Left Horn
M28
Rear Wiper – If
Equipped
Fuel Pump, Diesel
Lift Pump – If
Equipped
Power Mirror Switch,
Driver Window
Switch
M29
M30
M31
M32
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Ignition Switch, Wireless Control Module,
Steering Column Lock
– If Equipped
Powertrain Control
Module
Occupant Classification Module
Rear Wiper Module,
Power Folding Mirror
– If Equipped, Diagnostic Link
Back-Up Lamps
Airbag Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M33
M34
M35
M36
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
—
Description
Powertrain Control
Module
Park Assist/Rear
Camera, Climate Control System Module,
Headlamp Wash,
Compass, IR Sensor,
Relay Diesel Cabin
Heater, Radiator Fan
Diesel – If Equipped
Heated Mirrors – If
Equipped
—
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M37
M38
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
437
Description
Antilock Brakes, Stability Control System,
Stop Lamp Switch,
Fuel Pump Relay
Door and Liftgate
Lock/Unlock Motors
CAUTION!
• When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the integrated power
module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
(Continued)
7
438
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb No.
Dome Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TL212–2
Liftgate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Overhead Console Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . PLW214–2A
Reading Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WL212–2
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior
Bulb No.
Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9008 H13
Front Park/Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK
Front Sidemarker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057K
Center High Mounted Stoplamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
(serviced at an authorized dealer)
Fog Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H10 9145
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057K
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Reach behind the headlamp unit in the engine compartment to access the headlamp bulb lock ring.
3. Firmly grasp the lock ring on the back of the headlamp
unit housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
439
4. Rotate the lock ring on the back of the headlamp
housing counterclockwise to unlock it.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
Left Front Turn Signal
Access Door
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right (full
4. Twist the bulb counter clockwise to remove.
right lock).
2. Remove the door in the left wheel liner by twisting
counter clockwise. Access to the bulb can be gained
through the wheel liner hole.
7
440
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Right Front Turn Signal
c. Remove two rivets from the center of the grille.
1. Open the hood.
d. Remove one push pin from the top of each fender.
2. Reach behind the headlight unit in the engine compartment to access the turn signal bulb.
e. Pull the grille assembly toward you to disconnect
the grille clips to the fender and the headlamp ballstuds to the front end module.
3. Twist the bulb counterclockwise to remove.
3. Disconnect electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove.
bulb.
Front Side Marker
Front Fog Lamp (Front Fascia Mounted)
1. Open the hood.
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front
fog lamp.
2. Remove the grille assembly as follows:
a. Remove eight fasteners.
b. Remove two screws from each headlamp.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the front fog
lamp housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
441
3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, and Backup Lamp
them together to unlock the bulb from the front fog lamp
1. Open the lift gate.
housing.
2. Remove the two push pins.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
7
Push Pins
442
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull lamp straight back and disconnect electrical con- Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
nection.
1. Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL.
4. Remove the two screws attaching the backplate to the
lamp assembly.
5. Pull the backplate straight back from the lamp housing.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Remove the bulb from the backplate.
Screw Locations
2. Disconnect the electrical connector and washer hose (if
equipped) from the CHMSL.
3. Replace the CHMSL.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
443
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
4.0 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified)
Cooling System *
3.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
4.0 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
19.5 Gallons
Metric
73.8 Liters
5 Quarts
5.5 Quarts
4.7 Liters
5.2 Liters
14 Quarts
13.3 Liters
14 Quarts
13.3 Liters
7
444
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.7L Engine
Engine Oil – 4.0L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.7L Engine
Spark Plugs – 4.0L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 4.0L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
ZFR5LP-13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Preferred
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
445
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
SAE 80W-90 Multi-Purpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
SAE 75W-90 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 450
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
448
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
if it has been six months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumiOn Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
nated.
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
449 M
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your At Each Stop For Fuel
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, whichwhile the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
ever comes first.
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
450
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and the
brake master cylinder, add as needed.
S
C
H • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
E
operation.
D
U At Each Oil Change
L
E • Change the engine oil filter.
S
8
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
• Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can
cause damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
451 M
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 452 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
453 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 454 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
455 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 456 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.†
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
457 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 458 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
N
T 78 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (4.0L Engine).
❏ Replace the timing belt (4.0L Engine).
❏ Flush and replace engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169,00 km) or 60 months
(whichever occurs first).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
459 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 460 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
A
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
C ❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
E ❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
461 M
152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
462
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 465
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 466
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 466
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
9
464
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
465
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
466
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
467
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
468
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
469
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
470
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
Call toll free at:
and charts.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
471
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
472
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
474
INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 419
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 410
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,278
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,75,89,205
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,268
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,314
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 278
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,300,424
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
INDEX
475
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424,445
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,304
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 179
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . .
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . .
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Interlock . .
Break-In Recommendations, New
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Vehicle . . . . . . . . 86
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
. . . . . . . . . . . 91,438
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 24
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,89
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,314
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215,222
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,355
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
10
476
INDEX
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,273
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,404
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,77,82,84
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,82
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229,248,257
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212,215,221
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215,222
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214,223
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
INDEX
477
. . . . 418,443,444 Disposal
. . . . . . . . . . 427
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Used Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
. . . . . . . . . . 182
. . . . . . . . . . 465 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,276,281 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 179
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Dipsticks
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 160
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
10
478
INDEX
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 216
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 404
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401,402
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,355
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351,443
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407,443,444
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 72
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,355
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,415
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
INDEX
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410,444
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,201,439,440,441
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,427
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 444
479
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152,440
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351,352,444
10
480
INDEX
Requirements .
Tank Capacity .
Fuel System Caution
Fuses . . . . . . . . . .
...
...
..
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
443
443
354
432
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,358,403
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,130,351
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359,362
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359,361
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™)
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . .
Headlights
Bulb Replacement . . . . . .
Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
438
152
438
151
137
274
293
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
INDEX
481
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 169 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381,384
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,77 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197,198
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 LATCH
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 81,82
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10
482
INDEX
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,151
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,75,89,205
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,319
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152,205,440
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,198
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198,199
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 210
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
INDEX
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Service Engine Soon
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . 206,341
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,153,439,440,441
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 198
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
483
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,82
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 210,404
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212,219
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
10
484
INDEX
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410,444
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,443
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405,468
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409,443
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,404
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206,298,302
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,302
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198,380
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 351,352 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 5,469
Odometer
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407,444 Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
INDEX
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 325
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,308
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
485
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
10
486
INDEX
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 271 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,89
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 48
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,84
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,268 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
INDEX
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229,248,257
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,300
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 284
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,153,201,439,440,441
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333,334,382
487
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,308
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
10
488
INDEX
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,329,471
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 58
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 278
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 198
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325,326
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 341
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 325
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
INDEX
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,329
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,304
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,394
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204,314
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
489
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,445
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,300
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,300
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 169
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
10
490
INDEX
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,201,439,440,441
Warning Lights
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156,158,414
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214,223 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,358 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,178
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,276,281
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156,158,414
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Windshield Wiper Blades
Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . .
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . .
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
INDEX
491
.
.
.
.
.
414
156
158
188
158
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
291686.ps 11Y532-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/14/2010 08:26:13
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2011 Grand Caravan
2011
Chrysler Group LLC
11KA74-126-AF
Grand Caravan
OWNER’S MANUAL
Sixth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
291686.ps 11Y532-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/14/2010 08:26:13
2011 Grand Caravan
2011
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
11Y532-126-AA
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Caravan
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement